JP2021159145A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of solving problems in which, in the conventional game machines, in a game state advantageous to a player, since a game can be executed in a state of reducing a reduction speed of game balls which a player possesses, the player can perform a game until a next jackpot game is performed, with security feeling, meanwhile, if the next jackpot is generated immediately after setting the state to the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is finished soon, so the player cannot sufficiently perform the game in the advantageous game state, thereby causing a possibility of reducing of the game amusement.SOLUTION: There is provided a game machine which solves above mentioned problems, can extend an execution period of an advantageous game state as much as possible, and has high amusement property.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on a ball entering the starting port, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , There was one that performed a big hit game that opened the big winning opening. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, there is a gaming machine that sets a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high base state (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, the game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the high base state that is set after the end of the big hit game, shifts to another game state when the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number or when a big hit occurs. It was supposed to be a possible specification.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In a gaming machine as described above, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the reduction speed of the possessed game ball can be reduced to play the game, so that the player can play the game until the next big hit game with a sense of security. It can be carried out. On the other hand, if the next big hit occurs immediately after being set to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state ends immediately, and the game cannot be sufficiently performed in the advantageous gaming state. There was a risk that the interest in the game would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of prolonging the execution period of a gaming state advantageous to the player and enhancing the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
Based on the entry into the first starting port, the first hit / fail determination that can execute the jackpot determination to determine whether or not the hit is a big hit, and the first hit / fail determination.
Based on the entry into the second starting port, a large hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit and a small hit determination for determining whether or not a small hit can be performed, and a second hit / fail determination.
Based on the determination result of the first hit / miss determination, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information and the first identification information display means.
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second hit / fail determination, and
A jackpot game executing means that executes a jackpot game when the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second hit / fail determination is a small hit, and
With
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel.
It has a first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment.
When the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first hit / fail determination.
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the big hit determination cannot be executed and the second second hit / fail determination for executing the small hit determination is executed. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, a first hit / fail judgment that can execute a big hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a big hit, and a small hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a small hit are performed. The first identification information which has a feasible second hit / fail judgment and is variablely displayed based on the judgment result of the first hit / miss judgment, and the second identification information which is variablely displayed based on the judgment result of the second hit / miss judgment. Can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel. In addition, in the first specific fluctuation period, which is the fluctuation display period of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first hit / fail judgment, the new first hit / fail judgment cannot be executed and the jackpot judgment cannot be executed. Moreover, it is possible to execute the second second hit / fail determination that can execute the small hit determination. As a result, the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, and even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit, a small hit is generated in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information, and the game profit can be obtained. .. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention.
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second second hit / miss determination a plurality of times in the first specific fluctuation period.

According to such a gaming machine, the second second hit / fail judgment can be executed a plurality of times in the first specific fluctuation period, which is the change display period of the first identification information based on the judgment of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment. It is a period of various lengths. As a result, the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, and the second hit / fail judgment is executed a plurality of times even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit, and the small hit is made in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information. It can be generated and game profit can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention.
The big hit game is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the amount of game profit that can be obtained by the big hit game is larger than the amount of game profit that can be obtained by the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to obtain a smaller amount of game profit than the big hit game by the small hit game.

Further, the gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the first to third inventions.
The second starting port is a variable starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is determined to be a big hit is provided.
The gaming state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state.
The high probability and the first gaming state are set to a gaming state in which the small hit game is generated by the second hit / fail determination and a game profit can be obtained, so that the high probability and the second gaming state and the predetermined Probability and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The fluctuation time of the first identification information includes a first fluctuation time and a second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time.
The first specific fluctuation period is defined as the second fluctuation time.
When the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state, if the first hit / fail determination determines a big hit, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information, and the second variation. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second second hit / miss determination a plurality of times in time.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming states have a predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, and a high probability and the second gaming state, and have a high probability and the first gaming state. The state is a gaming state having a high probability and being more advantageous than the second gaming state, and a gaming state having a predetermined probability and being more gaming than the first gaming state. Further, when the gaming state has a high probability and is in the first gaming state, if a big hit is obtained in the first hit / fail determination, a second fluctuation time having a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information related to the jackpot. Then, in the second fluctuation time, the second second hit / miss determination can be executed a plurality of times.

As a result, when a high probability advantageous to the player and the first gaming state are set, the result of the first hit / fail determination becomes a big hit, and the second identification information is displayed even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit. The second hit / fail judgment of the above is executed a plurality of times, a small hit is generated in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information, and the game profit can be obtained. Further, as a result, even if the first game state is set with a high probability advantageous to the player and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the fluctuation display time of the first identification information related to the big hit is secured for a long time. However, it is possible to secure the execution period of the second second hit / fail determination in the first game state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small hit game as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of the fifth invention is the gaming machine of the fourth invention.
When the high probability and the first gaming state are set as the gaming state, by the time the first hit / fail determination and / and the second hit / fail determination are executed a specific number of times in the high probability and the first gaming state. It is characterized in that the second fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information when it is determined to be a big hit in the first hit / fail determination.

According to such a gaming machine, the first hit / fail judgment is performed from the time when the game state has a high probability and the first game state is set until the first hit / miss judgment and / and the second hit / fail judgment is executed a specific number of times. If it is determined to be a big hit, the second fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information. According to this, when the game state has a high probability and the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit in a short period of time after the first game state is set, the second fluctuation time of a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the big hit. It will be selected. Further, as a result, even if the condition that the gaming state has a high probability and the gaming state can be terminated in a short period of time after the first gaming state is set is satisfied, the variation display time of the first identification information related to the jackpot is lengthened. It is possible to secure time and secure the execution period of the second second hit / fail determination in the first game state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small hit game as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by prolonging the execution period of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting and entering a ball. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the process during the ordinary symbol change of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the game state setting process of Example 2.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as "directing button 63"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an “image display device”.

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low-base state, the second starting port 21, which is a variable starting port through which the game ball launched into the right game area 3B can enter, has a high base state in which the game ball enters the ball. It is set lower than (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state), and the probability of hit / fail judgment of special symbols (first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low ("" (Also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set longer (twice or more) than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (disengagement). All fluctuations are 10 minutes).

Further, the third start port 26, which is a fixed start port where the game ball launched into the right game area 3B can enter, is in the left game area 3A, although the ball entry frequency does not change depending on whether the ball is in the low base state or the high base state. The ball entry frequency (ball entry possibility) is set lower than that of the first start port 20, which is a fixed start port into which the launched game ball can enter.

Therefore, in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the second start port 21 and / and the third start port 26 to enter the second. Rather than displaying the special symbol in a variable manner (decision of whether or not the second special symbol is correct), the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first starting port 20, and the first special symbol is changed. It is said that it is advantageous for the player to perform the game to be displayed (the first special symbol winning / failing judgment). That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a gaming state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display (the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly executed). Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first winning / failing determination executing means".

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (doublet) such as "777" (also called "big hit symbol"). say). In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the symbol dedicated to the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is observed and grasped. Further, as the mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode of performing the effect display using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and a mode of the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has an aspect in which one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used for effect display. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, displays the first special figure hold. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as “second hit / fail judgment”), the normal symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21, which is a variable starting port, is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / miss determination executing means". It is also referred to as "second winning / failing determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts, and the predetermined jackpot (a predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first big winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. The game ball that has flowed down when the ball is entered into the winning opening 30 and is in the closed state (when closed) is allowed to flow in an arbitrary direction (the second starting port 21 or the third starting port, which will be described later) by means of the inclined upper surface passage. It is possible to guide to the second big winning opening 35 etc.). It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 allows the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first prize-winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by coming into contact with the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. Further, since the third start port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter the ball, when the left-handed game becomes a big hit (so-called first hit) and the first big hit game is executed in the right-handed game. , The game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second). 2 Special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface like the opening / closing member 32, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down when the ball is closed (when closed) is allowed to flow down in an arbitrary direction by the inclined upper surface passage (second large winning opening 35, which will be described later). Induce to.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second special winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (the second variable ball entry port) is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a ball in which the game ball can enter due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol winning / failing determination).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), hit the ball to the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at. That is, the jackpot game and the low-accuracy high-base state (state B), the high-accuracy high-base state (state B), or the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) are set to the second starting port 21 and / or the second by right-handed. 3 This is a right-handed game that mainly involves entering the ball into the starting port 26 (determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Then, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, the third start port 26, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, , A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) at each entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port 20. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, in the case of the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "outside mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are used based on the entry of the game ball. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”” in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as special symbol winning / failing determination, normal symbol winning / failing determination, and transition of game state. (Also referred to as a "game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let control be performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. NS.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the second specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "2R first jackpot". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", "2R 7th big hits", and "2R 8th big hits". In the "15R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" have the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the jackpot (1st jackpot 30). Twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

Further, for "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot", the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be described later. Move to the high probability state of (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to the low probability state described later (the probability change function is not activated). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit occurs. The game playability in the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right-handed game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period during which it is possible to determine whether the symbol is correct or not, generate a small hit, and increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between the big hits). In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 2nd big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" activate the "2nd special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 50 times. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high-accuracy and high-base state. In the case of "2R 5th jackpot", the "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next jackpot occurs, and the "high base generation function" either causes the next jackpot or changes in the special symbol. It ends based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R 5th jackpot", after the jackpot game is completed, until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, the high accuracy high base state is set, and even after 50 times, the jackpot does not occur. , The game state is set to the high accuracy and low base state.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, a right-handed game is performed in the right game area 3B to determine whether or not the second special symbol is correct, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is an advantageous period for players who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time by making small hits occur frequently by right-handed games. be. It is assumed that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed 50 times after the end of the big hit game, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state).

In addition, the "2R 6th jackpot" is in a high-accuracy high-base state until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as "2R 5th jackpot" except that the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" is set earlier than the "2R 6th jackpot" when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Therefore, it can be said that the "2R 5th jackpot" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "2R 6th jackpot".

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th jackpot", the player will not be notified because the game state will be in the low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Regardless of the state of the game, the player is expected to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has passed, and "2R". In the case of "8th big hit", the player will not be notified because the game state will be in the low probability low base state (normal state which is disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol has passed. Regardless of the state of the game, the player is expected to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". High-accuracy base state, high-accuracy high-base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot", and jackpot game related to "2R 8th jackpot" (2R 8th jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In addition, when the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. For this reason, the player plays with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state when the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, regardless of the gaming state in the non-notification state. , Will enhance the entertainment of the game.

In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected to continue at least the high-base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) without shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it shifts to the high accuracy and low base state. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be played, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. In this way, in the non-notification state, points that raise the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain a high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, which is one time (and) compared to other big hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R 3rd big hit game, the 4R 4th big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the game state at the time of small hits is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game is completed, and when a small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the jackpots in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 15R third jackpot 50%, 4R fourth jackpot 5%, 2R fifth jackpot 5%, and 2R sixth jackpot. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the ball entering the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 whose fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later. In that case, it becomes a 15R jackpot (15R third jackpot), and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second starting port 21 or the second starting port 21 or the second starting port 21 or the second starting port 21 or the first 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port is in the operating state or inactive. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a big hit is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, the player performs a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for the big hit, 2 minutes for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game proceeds in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

When the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second is 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can perform the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held as compared with the left-handed game (in state B, it is maintained or slightly reduced, and state C). It becomes possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second special symbol variable game) while increasing the number in the above. Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) for the state B. Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, as compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game torrent or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an obstructive member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down (entering the ball) to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to display the second special symbol in a variable manner without displaying it in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variablely displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in the high base state such as the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and in the high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the right-handed game. Improves game efficiency. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which normally triggers the determination of whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 during the right-handed game is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 changes in a shorter time than in the normal state, it is more than the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. It is set to be advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed game capable of executing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit game (small hit probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather the small hit occurs frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by letting them (generate multiple times in a short period of time).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the right-handed game causes the ball to enter the second starting port 21 frequently, so that the number of balls held is not significantly reduced. 2 Aim for the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is correct or not. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is frequently generated by a second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on a ball entering the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 by a right-handed game, and a small hit is generated. In addition to increasing the number of balls held in the game, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is used to aim for the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. It is advantageous for the player because the chances of (performing the small hit game) increase and the number of balls held can be gradually increased by the small hit game.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The three starting ports 26, the second starting opening 21, and the second winning opening 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B (90%) when each of these winning openings is closed. The above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, and then the upper game ball passage (about 30%) and the lower game ball passage (about 30%). About 70%).

The game ball distributed to the lower game ball passage flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the second winning opening 35, and then flows down to the out port 34. It is composed. Then, if there is an open winning opening (ball entrance) in the middle of the flow, the ball is entered into the winning opening and discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board. It is configured so that it does not flow down to the downstream game area. The game balls distributed to the upper game ball passage either enter the third start port 26, or flow further downstream without entering the third start port 26 and flow down toward the out port 34.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are open. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and among the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball passage are Most (95% or more) will enter the second starting port 21. That is, even if a small hit game occurs in a high base state, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball passage rarely enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, a 30/63 probability of a small hit, and a 32/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28, and then many game balls are opened at the second starting port 21. The ball enters and other game balls flow down from the game ball passage that branches in front of the second start port 21 to the upper game ball passage, and enter the third start port 26 without flowing down to the second start port 21. Ball or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly placed in the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is placed even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the game is opened with a predetermined probability, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first, and then enters the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only a game ball that has not been entered enters the second large winning opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and will reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. No.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second start port 21 enter the second start port 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even if a small hit is made and the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second big winning on the downstream side is performed by the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the second major winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 When the second big winning opening 35 is reached, if the second big winning opening 35 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is about half that of the high base state (high base state). Since it is set to 120/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. It becomes. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, hits and misses occur in about half and half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21. The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to 0.9 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), the second starting port 21 will open as long as the right-handed game is continued. It closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example where hits and misses occur alternately, the second start port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and then the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, becomes out, and closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and repeats the cycle (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about. 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in which the second start port 21 is in the closed state is about 70%. .. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the lower-stage game is compared with the high-base state in which the second start port 21 is in the open state for about 90% and the second start port 21 is in the closed state for about 10%. The game ball that has been distributed to the ball passage and has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaches the entrance of the second major winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. It is set with a high possibility of doing so. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies depending on whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. No. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As described above, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, about 70% of the game balls that flow down the right game area (flow down to the second starting port 21) are distributed to the lower game ball passage. The ball flows down (reaches) to the second large winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 opens in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, the first 2 The ball enters the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and is a small hit game. The ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state continues until at least the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol winning / failing determination (only the second special symbol winning / failing determination is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued). The longer the game continues, the more the player can increase the number of balls he has. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 to almost maintain the ball held (including a slight increase or decrease) (or hold). (While suppressing the speed of ball reduction), a state of playing with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a second starting port 21 or a third A game ball is inserted into the starting port 26, and when a small hit occurs, the ball is entered into the second big winning opening 35 to increase the number of balls held, and the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment becomes a big hit (advantageous big hit). It has a state of playing with expectation (high accuracy and low base state), and diversifies the playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-accuracy high-base state (high-accuracy high-base state, low-accuracy high-base state). ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the display is finished, the game state is changed to the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high base state, it is difficult for the effect symbol display unit or the like to recognize whether the high base state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. The game effect is executed in various display modes. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, it will change to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

Further, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot" as the types of jackpots that shift from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. The "2R 5th jackpot" shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 6th jackpot" shifts to the 100-time special symbol variation display. After that, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. In addition, it has "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" as high accuracy and low base states. The "2R 7th jackpot" shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 8th jackpot" is 100 times special. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has passed, the state shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, the high hit game and the high after the big hit game are related to the four big hit types of "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit". By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, it is in a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, 50 times according to the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" which are in the non-notification state. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after the passage of time, it is more likely that the high base state will shift to the high accuracy low base state after 100 times than when the high base state ends after 50 times. It is supposed to be done. As a result, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times, and the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state even after 50 times (). Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high accuracy and low base state. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

In addition, even if the possibility of shifting to the high accuracy and low base state is set to be the same regardless of whether the transition is made after 50 times or 100 times, the mode is changed to such a mode. On the contrary, the case of shifting after 50 times may be more likely to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state than the case of shifting after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high accuracy and low base state is lowered. Further, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has passed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times, has elapsed ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy, low-base state (if you don't get a big hit by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times, has elapsed (if it is a big hit by then). If not), it may be confirmed that the transition to the high-accuracy low-base state does not occur. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is satisfied in the middle of the non-notification state in the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and characters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (performing a definite effect). The status may be notified.

In addition, in the case where the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit or the result is a miss in the high accuracy / low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is obtained in the above-mentioned high base state. It is the same as the case of a big hit and the case of a miss.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second start port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the variable first large winning opening 30 may be provided. , It is necessary to provide it upstream from the second starting port 21 and the second large winning opening 35.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game should be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific gaming state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the above reaches 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a or the third start port sensor 26a. Judgment (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-in / entering ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This is the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball enters the second start port or the third start port. Applicable. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (pre-judgment), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (pre-judgment). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). As the special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what type of big hit is, and the information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / miss judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the values (0) to “238”), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit by the low-probability normal figure hit / miss judgment (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be wrong (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1008). S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Perform special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106), and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process is in progress to set the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since the first special symbol does not have a small hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In this S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the first special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot, the low probability hit / fail judgment (S1604) and the high probability hit / fail judgment (S1604) are executed. S1605) is also referred to as the first special figure 1 hit / fail judgment (first first hit / miss judgment). Further, in S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot, the second special figure (S1607) is executed. FIG. 1 Also referred to as a hit / fail judgment (second first hit / miss judgment). In the first special figure 1 hit / fail judgment (first first hit / miss judgment), a judgment process (big hit judgment) for judging whether a big hit or a miss is performed, and a second special figure 1 hit / miss judgment (second first hit / fail judgment) is performed. In the hit / fail determination), a determination process (deficiency determination) for determining (determining) only the deviation is performed.

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined that the hit / fail of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. If the hit / fail judgment of the 2nd special symbol (Special Figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, the 15R 3rd big hit, 4R 4th big hit, 2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit, 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, the second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (the fluctuation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is set. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of the fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since the game is performed mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first The variable display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simplified (there are few types and the fluctuation time is short). In the state B, if it is a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P15, and if it is out of the way, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P16. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P23, and in the case of a deviation, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P24.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted is provided, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the winning opening to closing) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second start port or the third start port (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first start port (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment). It is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the first special symbol winning / failing judgment (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

In this S1313, the low probability hit / fail judgment (S1303) and the high probability hit / fail judgment (S1303) to be executed when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the first special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot. S1309) and small hit determination (S1304, S1305) are also referred to as the first special figure 2 hit / fail judgment (first second hit / fail judgment). Further, in S1313, the small hit determination (S1305) to be executed when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit, is the second. It is also referred to as a special figure 2 hit / fail judgment (second second hit / fail judgment). In the first special figure 2 hit / fail judgment (first second hit / fail judgment), a judgment process (big hit judgment and small hit judgment) for judging whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed, and the second special figure 2 hit / miss judgment is performed. In the determination (second second hit / fail determination), a determination process (small hit determination) for determining whether a small hit or a miss is performed is performed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation flag is ON, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the states B and C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the states B and C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) than the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state A, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types and the time is short).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player fires the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). When it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has been completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the jackpot game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots. Determines whether or not falls under any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is determined whether the completed jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (S2203). .. When it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. If it is determined in S2209 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, either the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. As it is, finish the process. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot? Is determined (S2206). When it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a low accuracy high base state is obtained. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state is changed. Set "50" in the B counter (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and a low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether or not the time of the interval between the multiple opening has elapsed and the time to start the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed regardless of the passage of the start gate. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second big winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. If it is determined that it is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (also referred to as the first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Is stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high-probability state (also referred to as a predetermined display mode) is satisfied. Benefits) will end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power failure monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and a power failure signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction pattern game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91 is determined. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the process of S4403, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the process of S4403. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation patterns random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big prize opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set a round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is an ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening entry command), the big winning opening (1st big winning) specified based on the command A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. be. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game's interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

(Other Configuration 1 of Example 1)
Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is opened and closed in both the low base state (1/240 hitting the normal drawing) and the high base state (239/240 hitting the normal drawing). The structure is such that a game ball can enter. As a result, in the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the game is played in the right-handed game, the game is performed by inserting the game ball into the second start opening and the third start opening to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination.

Instead of such an embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal figure in the low base state may be set to "0" (0/240), and the second starting port may not open or close in the low base state. In such a configuration, in the high-accuracy low-base state in which the game is played in a right-handed game, the game is performed by inserting the game ball into the third starting port and executing the second special symbol winning / failing determination. Further, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the second start port can be opened and closed (239/240 is a normal figure), so the second start port and the third start port A game is performed in which a game ball is inserted into the ball to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination.

(Other Configuration 2 of Example 1)
Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol is determined by determining whether or not the first special symbol is correct based on the entry of the game ball at the fixed first starting port 20 that enters the ball when the left-handed game is performed. Was used as the entrance for variable display. In addition, the variable second starting port 21 and the fixed third starting port 25, which enter the ball when the right-handed game is performed, both perform the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry of the game ball. The second special symbol is used as an entrance for variable display.

In addition, by arranging a variable second starting port on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 35 that opens and closes in the small hit game, in a high base state (high accuracy high base state or high accuracy low base state). Even if the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and a small hit occurs, the game ball is accepted at the second starting port on the upstream side and the game ball does not easily flow into the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side. .. On the other hand, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed based on the entry into the second starting port and / and the third starting port and the small hit game is executed, the second is Since the opening frequency (opening time per unit time) of the second starting port on the upstream side of the second winning opening 35 is in a low state, the game ball that was not accepted by the second starting opening becomes the second winning opening 35. It is possible to enter a ball and obtain a game profit (prize ball) from a small hit game. As a result, the high-accuracy low-base state is made into a more advantageous gaming state than the high-accuracy high-base state (high-accuracy high-base state or high-accuracy low-base state).

In this mode, the fixed first starting port 20 that enters the ball when the left-handed game is played is subjected to the first special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry of the game ball, and the first special symbol is used. The variable second starting port 21 is used as the ball entry port for variable display, and the first special symbol is determined based on the ball entry of the game ball to obtain the first special symbol. The fixed third start opening 25, which is used as a variable display entrance and is used when performing a right-handed game, is used to determine whether or not the second special symbol is correct based on the entry of the game ball, and the second special symbol is used. It may be used as an entrance for variable display. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of hitting a normal figure in the low base state is "0".

According to such a configuration, when performing a right-handed game in a high base state (high accuracy high base state or high accuracy low base state), the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry into the second starting port 21. (No small hit) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / miss judgment (with small hit) is performed based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. Similar to the first embodiment, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to be considerably higher than the frequency of entering the third starting port 26, so that the second starting is performed by the right-handed game. Most of the game balls that flow down to the mouth or the third starting port will enter the second starting port. That is, in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed in the high base state, the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (entry into the second starting port) is the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. It is considerably higher than the execution frequency of (entry into the third starting port).

Therefore, since the high base state is digested (executed) by executing the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not result in a small hit, the frequency of small hits in the high base state is lower than that of the configuration of Example 1. Be crushed. Also in this configuration, as in the first embodiment, by arranging the variable second starting port 21 on the upstream side of the variable second big winning opening 35, in a high base state, when a small hit occurs, the second is second. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the large winning opening 35 as much as possible. In this configuration, in addition to this, the variable second starting port is used as an entry port for determining whether or not the first special symbol has a small hit, so that a small hit may occur in a high base state. Was reduced. As a result, the possibility that the player obtains the game profit by the small hit game is reduced more surely in the high base state. In addition, this made it possible to clarify the difference in playability (advantage) between the high base state and the high accuracy low base state, and to enhance the game interest.

Further, in this configuration, in the case of a right-handed game (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state, high accuracy low base state), the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment are determined by simultaneous fluctuation. Both pass / fail judgments will be executed. Therefore, in the case of a big hit as in the first embodiment, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not determined to be more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, but in the case of a big hit, the first special symbol is hit. It is preferable that there is no advantage or disadvantage in either the hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (for example, the feasible jackpot type is the same and the distribution is also the same).

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the second embodiment, some of the control processes are different from the control processes described in the first embodiment, and the other control processes are the same. Therefore, in the following, the control process of the first embodiment will be described only for different control processes, and the description of other common control processes will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when a high probability is set after the end of the big hit game (the game ball passes through a specific area during the big hit game), the gaming state of the high probability (probability change function) is a big hit. Regardless of the type of, it will continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when a high base state is set after the big hit game is completed, a value of "100" or "50" is set in the state B counter depending on the type of big hit, and the next big hit does not occur during the high base state. The high base state is set (shifted) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0". The state B counter is deducted by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed once.

That is, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state and the state B counter is set to "100", the high accuracy high base state is set. In, when the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the gaming state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. In addition, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high accuracy high base state and the state B counter is set to "50", the special symbol (first special symbol or the first special symbol or When the variation display of the second special symbol) is executed 50 times, the game state shifts to the high accuracy and low base state.

On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has a probability variation counter depending on the type of jackpot when a high probability is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game). If a value of "100" or "10000" is set and the next big hit does not occur during the high-probability gaming state, the high probability (probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is such that the value of the probability variation counter is ". When it becomes "0", it is set (shifted) to a low probability (predetermined probability). The probability variation counter is deducted by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed once.

In addition, when "10000" is set (set) in the probability variation counter, the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the high probability state, and the one-time change of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). Considering the time and the daily business hours of the amusement store, it is practically equivalent to the high probability that the high probability will continue until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the high-probability gaming state shifts to a low probability based on the number of times the special symbol fluctuates, and the pachinko gaming machine continues until the next jackpot. Have.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when a high base state is set after the big hit game is completed, a value of "100" or "50" (different value) is set in the state B counter depending on the type of big hit. If the next big hit does not occur during the high base state, the high base state is set (shifted) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0". Note that, unlike the first embodiment, this state B counter is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol is executed once. That is, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment changes the high base state to the low base state (changes the game state) based on the number of executions of the variation display of the normal symbol.

For example, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high accuracy high base state and the state B counter is set to "100", the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed 100 times in the high accuracy high base state. When executed, the gaming state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. In addition, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high accuracy high base state and the state B counter is set to "50", the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed 50 times in the high accuracy high base state. When executed, the gaming state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state.

FIG. 53 is a description of the normal symbol variation processing (S5000) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S5001), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S5001), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S5001), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S5002), and the process proceeds to S5003. In S5003, it is determined whether the state B flag (high base state setting flag) is ON (S5003), and when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S5003), S5007 Move to processing. When it is determined in S5003 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S5003), then the value of the state B counter is subtracted by "1" (S5004), and the process proceeds to S5005.

In S5005, it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter has become "0" (S5005), and if it is determined that the value has not become "0" (NO in S5005), the state B flag remains ON and S5007 Move to the processing of. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5005 that the value of the state B counter has become "0" (YES in S5005), the state B flag is turned off (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the low base state. Further, by turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

In S5007, the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S5007), and then the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol). Perform other processing such as stopping at (S5008), and finish the processing.

Further, in the first embodiment, it is assumed that each state (state A, state B, state C) has one type (3 seconds or 1 second) of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In the second embodiment, instead of such an embodiment, it is assumed that the state B has a plurality of fluctuation times of the normal symbol. For example, in the state B, there is a fluctuation time of 1 second, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern sorted and selected by the value (for example, any value from 0 to 99). The distribution ratio of the fluctuation time is, for example, 1 second: 40%, 10 seconds: 40%, 30 seconds: 20%, but any ratio may be used.

For example, when the game state is set to the state B (high base state), the more short fluctuation times are selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the earlier the state B (high base state) ends. After that, it shifts to a low base state. Conversely, the more long fluctuation times are selected, the longer the state B (high base state) continues, and then the transition to the low base state. Further, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy low-base state is more advantageous to the player than the high-accuracy high-base state. It is beneficial for the player to select many, end the high base state early, and shift to the high accuracy low base state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy high-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state is more advantageous to the player than the low-accuracy low-base state. It is beneficial for the player to be selected in large numbers and to continue the high base state for a long period of time to generate a big hit in the meantime or to shift to the low probability low base state.

Further, in another aspect, a plurality of fluctuation times of the normal symbol may be set also in the state A and / and the state B. Further, in the state B, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of more kinds of ordinary symbols than the state A and / and the state B can be selected.

FIG. 54 is a description of the special symbol 1 variable processing (S5100) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S5100), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S5101). When it is determined in S5101 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S5101), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S5109), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5101 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S5101), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103.

Next, in S5103, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S5103). In S5103, when the probability change flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the game state has a high probability (high probability state) (YES in S5103), the special symbol executed during the high probability (high probability state, probability change state) The value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5104), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S5105). When it is determined in S5105 that the value of the probability change counter is "0" (YES in S5105), the probability change flag is turned off (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107. As a result, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is set from a high probability to a low probability. Further, by turning off the probability change flag, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Specifically, if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy high-base state, and if it is a high-accuracy low-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5103 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low-probability gaming state (low-probability state) (NO in S5103), the process proceeds to S5107. In S5107, the operation status of special figure 1 is set to "3" (S5107), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S5108) and finish the process.

FIG. 55 is a description of the special symbol 2 variable processing (S5200) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special symbol 2 changing process (S5201), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1254 of FIG. 31, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S5201). When it is determined in S5201 that the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has not elapsed (NO in S5201), the special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S5209), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5201 that the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has elapsed (YES in S5201), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Next, in S5203, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S5203). When the probability change flag is ON in S5203, that is, when it is determined that the game state has a high probability (high probability state) (YES in S5203), the special symbol executed during the high probability (high probability state, probability change state) The value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S5205). When it is determined in S5205 that the value of the probability change counter is "0" (YES in S5205), the probability change flag is turned off (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207. As a result, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is set from a high probability to a low probability. Further, by turning off the probability change flag, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Specifically, if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy high-base state, and if it is a high-accuracy low-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5203 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low-probability gaming state (low-probability state) (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to S5207. In S5207, the operation status of special figure 2 is set to "3" (S5207), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S5208) and finish the process.

FIG. 56 is a description of the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment. In the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment, the same process as the process of the game state setting process (S2121) of the first embodiment will be described with the same flow number. In the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, five types of 4R first jackpot, 15R third jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot, 2R fifth jackpot, and 2R sixth jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots. , It is determined whether the jackpot game corresponds to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game completed this time is a jackpot game related to the probability variation jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2203.

In S2203, it is determined whether the completed jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). When it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), "100" is set in the probability variation counter (S5051), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter. Is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is completed. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times (the number of times the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. In this way, in the case of the 2R fifth big hit, the value set in the probability variation counter and the value set in the state B counter are different values. However, depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol selected in the high accuracy high base state, the gaming state in the high accuracy high base state may change to the low accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy may change. In some cases, it changes to the low base state, and at the same time, the counter becomes "0" and shifts to the low probability low base state. The timing of the change also differs from time to time.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), set "100" to the probability variation counter (S5052), turn on the state B flag (S2210), and set the state B counter. Is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is completed. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times (the number of times the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. Further, in the case of the 2R fifth big hit, the value set in the probability variation counter and the value set in the state B counter are the same value. However, depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol selected in the high accuracy high base state, the gaming state in the high accuracy high base state may change to the low accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy may change. In some cases, it changes to the low base state, and at the same time, the counter becomes "0" and shifts to the low probability low base state. The timing of the change also differs from time to time.

Further, in the second embodiment, the same "100" is set in the probability variation counter after the end of the 2R 5th big hit game and after the end of the 2R 6th big hit game. You may set the value. For example, like the state B counter, it may be set to "50" after the end of the 2R 5th big hit game, and may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R 6th big hit game. Further, each of the counters may be less than the state B counter, and may be set to "20" after the end of the 2R 5th big hit game and "30" after the end of the 2R 6th big hit game. Further, each of the counters may be larger than the state B counter, and may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R 5th big hit game and "150" after the end of the 2R 6th big hit game. Further, only one of them may be set to more than the state B counter, and may be set to "100" after the end of the 2R 5th big hit game and "50" after the end of the 2R 6th big hit game.

If it is determined in S2209 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, either the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the probability variation counter is set to "10000". Is set (S5053), and the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state. It should be noted that this high-accuracy and low-base state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then is the finished jackpot game the 2R 7th jackpot? Is determined (S2206). When it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times (the number of times the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high base state is set. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state is changed. Set "50" in the B counter (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times (the number of times the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high base state is set.

In the second embodiment described above, in the gaming state of the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, a plurality of fluctuation times of different lengths are provided as the variation display of the normal symbol, and a predetermined variation time is selected from them. The value of the state B counter is decremented based on the number of times the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, an example of changing the gaming state to a high-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy low-base state when the value of the state B counter becomes "0" has been described. That is, an example was described in which the condition for changing the high base state to the low base state was the number of executions of the variable display of the normal symbol.

By changing to such a mode, or in addition, when a predetermined condition such as after the end of the big hit game is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the game state set in the high base state. 1 The first condition state of the normal symbol (first specific condition state) determined based on the specific condition, and the second condition state of the normal symbol (second specific condition state) of determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the second specific condition. ), And may have. Then, when the second condition state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (average time of the fluctuation time) of the normal symbol is shorter than that when the first condition state of the normal symbol is set. The normal symbol first condition state and the normal symbol second condition state are both states in which the time saving function is activated with respect to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the high base state is switched to the low base state. As a result, the time saving function becomes inactive. Further, in any of the gaming states of the normal symbol first condition state and the normal symbol second condition state, a plurality of fluctuation times of the normal symbol may be provided.

According to such an aspect, the value of the state B counter is "0" in the gaming state in the high-accuracy high-base state and the second condition state than in the gaming state in the high-accuracy high-base state and the first condition state. There is a high possibility that the period will be short. Therefore, in the gaming state of the high-accuracy high-base state and the second condition state, there is a high possibility that the time from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state will be earlier. There is a high possibility that the high-accuracy high-base state will change to the high-accuracy low-base state. That is, the gaming state in which the high accuracy and high base state and the first condition state are present is more advantageous for the player.

(Other configurations 3 of Examples 1 and 2)
Further, in the above-described first and second embodiments, only a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the jackpot fluctuation time when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination in the state C advantageous to the player is a jackpot. Instead of such an aspect, a plurality of fluctuation times such as 30 seconds and 240 seconds (second fluctuation time) are set as the fluctuation time for the jackpot when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment in the state C is a jackpot. It may be set.

According to the playability (simultaneous fluctuation machine) of this pachinko gaming machine, even though the gaming state is set to state C (high accuracy and low base state), immediately after that (immediately, early), the first special symbol When the hit / fail determination is executed and the result is a big hit, the game state in the high accuracy / low base state set with much effort may end and the big hit game may start. Further, it is sufficient that the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy low-base state again, but it may shift to another gaming state such as the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. In such a case, the player makes a second special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high accuracy / low base state, even though the high accuracy / low base state is advantageous, and the small hit game. It was not possible to fully enjoy a special game (small hit rush) with a high taste, such as frequently occurring and gaining a game profit, and there was a risk that the taste would be lowered.

Even in such a case, the fluctuation time for the jackpot when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a jackpot is a relatively long fluctuation time such as 240 seconds (longer than the other jackpot fluctuation time, the deviation fluctuation time (No. 1). By setting the jackpot fluctuation time (longer than the jackpot fluctuation time of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment), which is longer than 1 fluctuation time), immediately after setting the high accuracy and low base state (for example, the 1st fluctuation and 4). (Within fluctuation, etc.) Even if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed multiple times during the big hit change of the first special symbol, and the small hit game occurs frequently (multiple). It is possible to obtain game profit by generating (occurring times).

This makes it possible to execute the hit / fail judgment and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the second special during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (first specific fluctuation period). A special second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second second special symbol hit / fail judgment, second second It depends on whether it is true or false). Further, the fluctuation time for small hits may be 4 seconds as shown in FIG. 9, and the fluctuation time for small hits during execution of the fluctuation time for big hits when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is 2 seconds. It may be a shorter fluctuation time such as. Further, in this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, such a control process is not executed when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit. It shall be.

(Other configurations 4 of Examples 1 and 2)
In addition, the probability of selecting a long fluctuation time (240 seconds) as the jackpot fluctuation time when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a jackpot is set for a specific period after the high accuracy / low base state is set after the jackpot game ends. During that time, it may be a high probability. For example, four times (the number of times corresponding to the upper limit storage number of the first special symbol hold) after the high-probability low base state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and / or the second special) If the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit by the time the symbol) is executed, the probability of selecting a longer fluctuation time (240 seconds) than the selection in other periods (subsequent periods) is set. It may be higher. Specifically, a long fluctuation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a 100% probability from the setting of the high accuracy / low base state to the execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol four times. A long variation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a 60% probability. Further, in the period after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed four times, a long fluctuation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a probability of 30%, or a long fluctuation time may not be selected (up to four rotations). It may be a dedicated variable time of).

In addition, it is not the period until the four special symbol variation display is executed, but only when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment after the high probability / low base state is set is a big hit. The probability of choosing a long variation time (240 seconds) may be increased. As a result, even if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit immediately after the high accuracy / low base state is set, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed a plurality of times during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. , It becomes possible to obtain a game profit by frequently causing a small hit game.

(Other configurations 5 of Examples 1 and 2)
In addition, the fluctuation time (disengagement fluctuation time) when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment for a predetermined period after the high accuracy / low base state is set is different from or in addition to the above-mentioned configuration. It may be different from the deviation fluctuation time after the predetermined period is exceeded. Specifically, as a predetermined period, it may be from the time when the high accuracy / low base state is set until the variation display of the first special symbol is executed four times (specified number of times). That is, in this configuration, the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed from the 1st to the 4th times after being set to the high accuracy and low base state is different from the deviation fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol after the 5th time. Set to variable time.

Further, as in the configuration of (other configuration 2 of the first embodiment), the fixed first starting port 20 for entering the ball when performing the left-handed game is the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. The first special symbol is used as an entry port for variable display of the first special symbol by performing a hit / fail judgment, and the variable second start opening 21 for entering the ball when performing a right-handed game is the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. The first special symbol is used as an entry port for variable display of the hit / fail judgment, and the fixed third start opening 25 for entering the ball when performing a right-handed game is the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. The hit / fail judgment is made and the second special symbol is used as an entrance for variable display. Further, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low base state is set to "0", or the probability of hitting a low figure such as "1/290" is set.

Here, the high-accuracy low-base state is regarded as an advantageous gaming state in which a small hit game is generated by a right-handed game and the game can be played while obtaining more game profit than in the high-base state. .. In addition, when the probability of hitting a normal figure in the low base state (high accuracy low base state) is set to "0", the high accuracy low base state is the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port. The game is executed mainly on. Even if the probability of hitting a normal figure in the high-accuracy and low-base state is set to "1/290", the main body is the second special symbol hit / fail judgment.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy low-base state is a gaming state that is set after the end of a predetermined jackpot game. However, since the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine, it is during the jackpot game or before the start of the jackpot game. If the special figure 1 hold (upper limit storage number is 4) is held, after the start of the high-accuracy low base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the first special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold are held. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol based on entering the third starting port by the right-handed game are executed in parallel (simultaneously).

In this way, the high-accuracy low-base state is essentially a game in which the second special symbol winning / failing determination having the small hit determination is executed and the small hit game is enjoyed, but after the big hit game is completed. Only immediately after the start of the high-accuracy low-base state, the first special symbol winning / failing determination and the second special symbol winning / failing determination having no small hit determination are executed in parallel. The player feels annoyed when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment that does not have such a small hit judgment is executed for a long period of time, and if the first special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, the high accuracy and low base state ends. If this is done, there is a risk that the taste and motivation for the game will be significantly reduced. Therefore, it is better to end the parallel period in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (including the variable display) and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (including the variable display) are executed in parallel as soon as possible. It will give people a sense of security and enhance the game entertainment after the end of the parallel period.

Therefore, as described above, the gaming machine having the other configuration has at least a short fluctuation time (for example, 1 second, the first deviation fluctuation time) as the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the high accuracy and low base state. It is assumed that a plurality of fluctuation times of a long fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds, a second deviation fluctuation time) are provided. Then, until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, four times corresponding to the upper limit number of holdings of the first special symbol) after setting the high accuracy and low base state is executed, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is out of order. If this happens, be sure to select a short fluctuation time (1 second) and execute it. As a result, even if four first special figure reservations (predetermined number) are stored at the start of the high-accuracy low-base state, the above-mentioned parallel period is "short-time fluctuation time x 4 (about 4 seconds)". It will be terminated, and the parallel period can be terminated in an extremely short period of time. The period in which the variation display number of the special symbol is 4 times may be until the variation display of the 1st special symbol is executed (started) 4 times, or the variation display number of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It may be until the total number of times of the fluctuation display number of the symbol is executed (started) four times. Further, this predetermined period is not limited to 4 times, and may be 8 times in total of the upper limit number of the first special figure reservation and the upper limit number of the second special figure reservation.

In addition, after the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, four times corresponding to the upper limit number of holdings of the first special symbol) after setting the high accuracy and low base state is completed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed for some reason. If the judgment judgment result is out of alignment, a long fluctuation time (120 seconds) is executed as the deviation fluctuation time. This is because the right-handed game is started in a high-accuracy and low-base state, and after the above-mentioned parallel period is over, the handle is separated due to the case of leaving the seat in the toilet or telephone, or the hand slipping. In such a case, the firing strength may be loosened and the left-handed game may be temporarily performed unintentionally.

In such a case, even if a plurality of game balls have entered the first starting port 20, if the first special symbol winning / failing determination is repeated in a short time, the first special symbol winning / failing determination is unintentionally performed. There is a risk that it will be a big hit and the high accuracy and low base state will end. Therefore, after the 1st special symbol and / or the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed a predetermined number of times (4 times) (after the end of the parallel period), the 1st special symbol is variablely displayed again, and the judgment of whether or not the 1st special symbol is correct is made. If the result is off, a long fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds, second deviation fluctuation time) shall be selected as the deviation fluctuation time.

Further, it has been explained that the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a short fluctuation time for the predetermined period after the start of the high-accuracy low base state, but the deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the predetermined period is the first. 1 The fluctuation time is longer than the deviation fluctuation time selected by the special symbol. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in a predetermined period, the big hit fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as described in (Other configurations 3 of Examples 1 and 2). Select a long variation time (eg, 240 seconds). As a result, even if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit immediately after setting the high accuracy / low base state, even during the big hit fluctuation time, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment described above is executed to make a small hit. It is possible to generate a winning game and obtain a game profit.

In addition, the predetermined period after setting the high-accuracy low-base state (after the start) is both the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the jackpot fluctuation time of the first special symbol (may be the jackpot fluctuation time of a specific jackpot). Since it is determined in advance, if it is determined in advance that there is a big hit in the predetermined first special figure hold by the preliminary judgment, a specific game production (effect mode name) is performed after the high accuracy and low base state is set (after the start). , Display a specific background effect on the display screen, display a specific character) Execute a special effect mode. Then, the common special effect mode may be executed during the execution period of the deviation variation related to the first special symbol and the execution period of the subsequent jackpot variation.

For example, when the deviation is stored in Holds 1 to 3 of the first special figure hold and the jackpot is stored in Hold 4, these four fluctuation display times (variation display time of about 243 seconds (1 + 1 + 1 + 240)) are used. The special effect mode may be executed. In addition to this, the special effect mode may be executed even during the big hit game. In this way, in the period of 243 seconds of the four fluctuation display times, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, the game profit (prize ball) is obtained by the occurrence of the small hit game, and then the second special symbol is obtained. 1 It is confirmed that a special jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, a specific jackpot game is executed, and a game profit (prize ball) is also obtained in the jackpot game.

Therefore, the game profit acquisition period (first game profit acquisition period) by the small hit game and the game profit acquisition period (second game profit acquisition period) by the big hit game that occurs continuously in the four variable display times are set in advance. Since it occurs continuously in a predetermined period, it is possible to execute an effective game effect with a high taste by executing the special effect mode in both periods. In addition, by displaying the game profit (total game profit), which is the sum of the game profits acquired during these two periods, on the predetermined display unit on the display screen, the player feels that he / she has acquired a large amount of game profits, and the game It will be possible to enhance the interest.

It should be noted that this special effect mode is an effect mode that occurs only when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in a predetermined period after the high accuracy / low base state is set, and the first special effect is performed in the subsequent period. Even if the result of the symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the special effect mode may not be executed. In addition, this special effect mode is an effect mode that occurs only when a big hit is stored in the first special figure hold (any of 1 to 4) when the high accuracy and low base state is set (started). May be good.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first special symbol described later or the first special symbol described later). The variable display was made in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the 1st hit / fail determination or the 2nd hit / fail determination is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in this embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is multiple. It may be a number of times, or it may have a different number of open rounds. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , The so-called special figure 2 priority control process, the control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, and the so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary determination) (“Processing at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205)”. See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the method of prior determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, the main control unit or sub-control of the area (acquisition information storage means) for storing the acquisition information (that is, the acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be pre-determined. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. No.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.
(Reference Invention 1)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, the game was aimed at the first starting port, and in the high base state, the game was aimed at the second starting port. In addition, there are gaming machines that perform so-called right-handed gaming, in which a game is aimed at the right area of the gaming area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it cannot be said that efficient gaming can proceed. In view of the above circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined gaming area, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming efficiency. At the same time, we will provide gaming machines that enhance the interest of gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A specific starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
Specific identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the specific start port and specific identification information
Identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the variable starting port and
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state, and
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter, and a special game execution means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with the above, and is characterized in that the specific start port, the first variable entry port, the variable start port, and the second variable entry port are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific start port, a first variable ball entry port, a variable start port, and a second variable ball entry port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are upstream of the game area. Downstream from the specific start port, the first variable ball entry port, the variable start port, and the second variable ball entry port are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state), and the specific start port related to this must be entered. Place it in the uppermost stream in the ball mouth. This increases the possibility that the variable starting port is first in the second state (open state). Further, by adopting a gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific start port continues to flow down the game area, the subsequent game can proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to speed up the ball entry when a special game is executed and to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable entry port upstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the variable start opening that is in the second state during the special game and enters the first variable entry port. It is also possible to prevent a situation in which entry is hindered.

In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the variable start port in the second state can be used except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in a special game. , It is possible to give priority to the flowing game ball over other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the ball does not enter the variable starting port even though the variable starting port is in the second state. Further, by arranging the second variable entrance port downstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the second variable entrance based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start opening. The frequency will change, and it will be possible to add a variety of playability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As the special aspect, it has a first special aspect and a second special aspect.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game is considered to have more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special aspect and a second special aspect as modes of stop display of identification information for executing a special game, and the first special game and the first special game as special games. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is set as a special game in which the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is set to the ball-entry state (open state), and the second special game is set. Then, the second variable entry port is set to be in a state where the ball can enter.

Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port related to this is arranged at the uppermost stream among these entry ports. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific start port, the ball entry when the first special game with a large amount of game profit is executed can be speeded up, and a large amount of game balls can be played in a short period of time. Allows acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entry port, the second state is variable except when the first variable entry port is in a ball-entry state in a special game. It is possible to allow a flowing game ball to enter the starting port with priority over other entry ports. Further, the second variable entry port, which is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game in which the game profit amount is small, is arranged downstream of the variable start opening, and it is possible to add various game features. This makes it possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, profits that can be obtained, and variable entry port for opening state) can be exemplified.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
A first game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set
In the second gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the ball is inserted into the second variable starting port arranged on the downstream side of the variable starting port. By making it difficult to enter the ball
The first game state is characterized in that the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is low and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first gaming state. Since the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state is in the second variable entry state rather than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the game is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable entrance port is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit (for example, the prize ball given by the entry of one game ball) obtained by the entry of the game ball is second than that of the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state when the second special game occurs, the game ball that has flowed down can easily enter the second variable entry port on the downstream side. In the second gaming state, in which the variable start port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable start port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable ball entry port, which has more game profits that can be obtained than the variable start port, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , Enhance the game entertainment. In addition, this makes it possible to make the game profits that can be obtained different when the same second special game occurs between the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. It becomes.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the gaming state before the execution of the second special game and the gaming state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same gaming state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating a game, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-6.
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The first identification information which is variablely displayed based on the entry into the first starting port is provided.
The first identification information and the identification information can be variablely displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variablely displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information that is variablely displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are displayed in parallel. Variable display is possible (at the same time). This makes it possible to diversify the game playability while providing smooth game progress in a simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can variablely display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously). do.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest while enabling smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), there are a plurality of gaming states as game states, and when the jackpot game is executed, the normal state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state which is advantageous to the player. It has become a transitional gaming machine. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbol is displayed fluctuating a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect such as preventing the game from getting bored by shifting the gaming state has been exhibited.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the game playability and enhances the gaming interest by giving a feature to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the first starting port and the first identification information
The second identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the second starting port and the second identification information
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number of times, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the highly probable second gaming state to the highly probable first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing the common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the game state changes to the second game state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the game interest. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that in the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 2, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the first starting port and the first identification information
The second identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the second starting port and the second identification information
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A gaming machine equipped with a launching device that launches a gaming ball into a gaming area with a predetermined firing intensity.
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting port is provided in a second game area where a game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter.
As the specific result, the first specific result is obtained.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
As a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port, the first specific result is not obtained.
It is characterized by having the first specific result as a result of the variation display of the second identification information based on the entry into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. .. Then, when the first specific result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of fluctuations displayed with and is reached a specific number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specific result, and the result of the variable display of the second identification information has the first specific result. As a result, different game characteristics can be provided depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the first start port and the game ball is inserted into the second start port, and the game playability is diversified to enhance the game interest. It becomes possible to increase.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
As the specific result, it has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specified number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.
It is characterized by having the second specific result as a result of the variation display of the second identification information based on the entry into the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the specified number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, this makes it possible for the player to expect that the game state changes to the first game state with a high probability when a specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the game interest. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2.
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the third specific result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the first game state with a high probability, and the game state does not change until the next specific result is obtained in the game state. And
It is characterized by having the third specific result as a result of the variation display of the first identification information based on the entry into the first starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the second specific result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, when the third specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained with a high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to be done. As a result, as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, there is no one that changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability based on the variation display of a specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability of guaranteeing the gaming state of the first gaming state from later until the next specific result is obtained. Further, this makes it possible to play the game with a sense of security in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that in the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-5.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the first starting port and the first identification information
The second identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the second starting port and the second identification information
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
As the specific result, the first specific result and the fourth specific result are included.
When the first specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.
When the fourth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display becomes the second number, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the first specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the first number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. Further, when the fourth specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with a high probability, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the second number, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a high probability to the first gaming state with a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

In this embodiment, when the number of times of variation display between the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a second. 1 It is assumed that the game state is changed. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the second identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the first identification information, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state with high probability. It may change from the first game state with a high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of variation display of the first identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times regardless of the number of times of variation display of the second identification information, the gaming state is highly probable and the second game is played. It may change from the state to the first gaming state with high probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the specific result, a second specific result and a fifth specific result are provided.
When the second specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
When the fifth specific result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability.
The game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing the common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state has the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is that the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first is the first in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display between the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth specific result is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display with and is reached the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second game state and the high probability and the second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state or a high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of changes in the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. Further, as a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times elapses and the second number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is said that there is a higher probability that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability when the gaming state changes in the second number of times than when the gaming state changes in the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the second number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the first number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state is maintained without changing, and the player reaches the second number of times with the game state remaining in the second game state. At that time, the game is played with a high probability of raising the expectation of changing to the first game state. As a result, in the second gaming state, there is a point of increasing the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a higher probability than when the gaming state changes in the first number of times than in the case where the gaming state changes in the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is set to be larger than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher when the first number of times is than when the change timing of the gaming state is the second number of times. There is a high probability that the game will change to the first gaming state. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the game state will change, and when the game state reaches the second number of times while the second game state remains, it is possible. Although the sex is lower than that of the first number of times, the game is played with a high probability of changing to the first game state. As a result, in the second gaming state, there is a point of increasing the expectation of a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the first game state with a high probability than in the second game state with a high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state in which the high probability and the first gaming state has a higher probability and the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that in the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability with the passage of a specific number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The first special game makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game.
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can be entered in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-entry state makes it possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-entry state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first game state is reached with a high probability, the first game state continues with a high probability even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it becomes possible to obtain more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 4, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the first starting port and the first identification information
The second identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the second starting port and the second identification information
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result.
A first condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the first condition, and a second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is determined based on the second condition. A gaming machine equipped with a second identification information fluctuation time determination means that can be set.
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information to be determined is shorter than that in the first condition state.
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, and the high probability and the first gaming state and the first condition. It is characterized by having a two-condition state, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, and a first condition state and a first condition state. (2) A second identification information fluctuation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the identification information is shorter than that of the first condition state is provided. Further, the gaming states have a predetermined probability, a first gaming state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability, a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability, a first gaming state and a second condition state, and a high probability. In addition, it has a second gaming state and a second condition state, and in the gaming state in which the first condition state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
It is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific result. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result is more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the game profit, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. be. As a result, the player expects to be set to a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed a lot, that is, a second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is relatively short. Will play the game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
Equipped with a third starting port where game balls can enter
The second identification information is varied and displayed based on the entry of the ball into the third starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that a third starting port is provided in which the second identification information is variablely displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information can be displayed in a variable manner by entering either the variable second starting port or the third starting port, and the game can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are second games in which a game ball launched with the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in the area
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the first game area to fluctuate and display the first identification information. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area to display the second identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the third start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are filled with a game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity. Provided in the second possible gaming area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the first game area to fluctuate and display the first identification information. ,
The gaming states are the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the first. In the two-condition state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area to display the second identification information in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second ball entry port are provided. The variable ball entry port is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game ball is launched into the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming states are a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, It is assumed that a game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is played by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is performed with the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-5.
It is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state than in the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state in which a high probability, a first gaming state, and a second condition state have a higher probability of gaining a game profit than a high probability, a second gaming state, and a second condition state. There is. As a result, the player advances the game with the expectation that the game state is set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, and enhances the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, the game ball is inserted into the second start port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, and the ball is inserted into the second start port, and the ball is more than the second start port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port is increased with a high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the state and the first gaming state and the second condition state are made higher than the second condition state with a higher probability.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability is higher and the first game state and the second condition state are higher in probability and second. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher than that in the game state and the second condition state. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The first variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a second variable entry port.
The first identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the first starting port and the first identification information
The second identification information that fluctuates based on the entry into the second starting port and the second identification information
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
When the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter. Game execution means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result is provided. It ’s a game machine,
The gaming states include the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state. death,
The second variable ball entry port is characterized in that when the game state has a high probability and the first game state is reached, the frequency of ball entry of the game ball increases.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming states include a predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a predetermined probability and the second gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, and a high probability and the second gaming state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable ball entry port increases when the first game state is reached with a high probability. As a result, the player proceeds with the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the first game state with a high probability. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first gaming area where a gaming ball launched at the first firing intensity can enter.
The second start port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are second game areas in which a game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, the game is played by firing the game ball into the first game area to fluctuate and display the first identification information.
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area. As a result, it is a gaming machine that plays a game by varyingly displaying the second identification information.
In a gaming state in which the second identification information is variablely displayed and the game is played by launching a game ball into the second game area.
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher than the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state, and the first gaming state. Is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first gaming area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , It is provided in the second gaming area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. Then, when the gaming state has a predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the first identification information is variablely displayed to play the game. Further, when the gaming state has a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, or a high probability and a second gaming state, a gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area and the second identification information is obtained. It is supposed that the game is played with a variable display. Further, in the gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area to play the game, that is, in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state, the second The game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry port is the highest is defined as the first game state with a high probability.

As a result, when the player enters the gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area to play the game, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is the first gaming state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2.
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the second special game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second. It is characterized in that the first gaming state is made higher with a higher probability than the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, a second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and a second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the ball-entry state (open state) in the second special game, the probability and the first game state are higher than those in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance differently depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game playability, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 6, it is possible to diversify the game playability and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on a ball entering the starting port, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , There was one that performed a big hit game that opened the big winning opening. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, there is a gaming machine that sets a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high base state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In addition, the high base state set after the end of the big hit game is a high base state in which the frequency of entering the starting port is higher than that in the low base state, and this high base state is a variable display of the special symbol. It was specified that when the number of times reaches a predetermined number, the state shifts to a low base state.

In the conventional gaming machine as described above, in the high base state, the decreasing speed of the possessed game ball can be reduced to play the game, so that the player can play the game until the next big hit game with a sense of security. can. On the other hand, in the high base state, when the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed becomes a predetermined number of times and the high base state ends and the state shifts to the low base state, there is a risk that the game interest may be deteriorated. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state and enhances the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A specific start port where a game ball can enter and (Public figure start port)
A variable starting port that can be changed to the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and (special 2 starting port).
Specific identification information display means that variablely displays specific identification information (ordinary symbol) based on the entry into the specific start port, and
A determination means for making a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port, and
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and
When the determination result of the determination means becomes a big hit, the big hit game execution means for executing the big hit game and the big hit game execution means
When the determination result of the determination means becomes a small hit, the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game and the small hit game execution means.
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the determination result of the determination means becomes the first specific result.
With
The gaming state has the high probability and the first gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state.
The game state with the high probability and the first game state has the high probability and the second game state by setting the execution frequency of the small hit game to be higher than the game state with the high probability and the second game state. It is considered to be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state of the game state.
When the game state has a high probability and the variation display of the specific identification information is executed a specific number of times in the second game state, the game state shifts to the first game state with a high probability. Is what you do.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific identification information display means for variablely displaying the specific identification information based on the entry into the specific start port, and the identification for variable display of the identification information based on the entry into the variable start opening. It is provided with information display means. Further, it has a first game state and a second game state in which it has a big hit game and a small hit game, and the frequency of entering the variable starting port is different, and a predetermined probability and a high probability are set as the judgment probabilities of the judgment means. It has at least a high probability and a first gaming state and a high probability and a second gaming state as a gaming state. Further, by making the execution frequency of the small hit game different depending on the game state, the high probability and the first game state is set to the game state which is more advantageous to the player than the high probability and the second game state. Then, the gaming state with a high probability and the second gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state with a high probability which is advantageous to the player when the number of variable display times of the specific identification information becomes the specific number of times.

As a result, the gaming state with a high probability and the second gaming state changes to the gaming state with a high probability and the first gaming state with a high probability of executing the small hit game based on the number of variable display times of the specific identification information. The person enhances his or her preference for changes in the playing state. In addition, since the execution frequency of the small hit game is improved by changing the game state, the player enhances the game interest.

Further, unlike the conventional gaming machine, the gaming state is shifted according to the number of variable display times of the specific identification information, instead of shifting the game state according to the number of variable display times of the specific identification information. It is difficult to predict, and I am surprised that the game state has changed at an unexpected timing, which enhances my taste. In addition, the frequency of execution of the small hit game increases at an unexpected timing, and the player is excited to be in a game state in which more benefits (prize balls) can be obtained than before, and enhances the taste.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
The probability setting means is characterized in that when the variation display of the identification information is executed a special number of times with the high probability, the probability is set to the predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is executed a specific number of times in the gaming state with a high probability, it is set to a predetermined probability. As a result, in the gaming state in which the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state, the high probability is set to a predetermined probability when the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a special number, and the second when the number of fluctuations of the specific identification information reaches a specific number. Set the gaming state to the first gaming state. In addition, this will diversify the changing mode and changing timing of the game state, and enhance the game's interest.

Further, in the gaming state in which the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state, the high probability is set to a predetermined probability when the number of fluctuations of the identification information reaches a special number, and the second game when the number of fluctuations of the specific identification information reaches a specific number. In order to change the state to the first gaming state, depending on the fluctuation time of the identification information and the fluctuation time of the specific identification information, the state may change from the second gaming state to the second gaming state with a high probability, or the second gaming state with a high probability. It changes from the state to the first gaming state with a high probability, or changes to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. In addition, this change timing is also diversified depending on the fluctuation time of the identification information and the fluctuation time of the specific identification information. In addition, this will diversify the playability and enhance the game interest.

Further, the variable display time of the identification information may have at least a first special time and a second special time longer than the first special time. As a result, when many long fluctuation times are selected, the high-probability gaming state becomes a long time, and when many short fluctuation times are selected, the high-probability gaming state becomes a short time. Therefore, the longer the long fluctuation time is selected and the high-probability gaming state becomes longer, the more the number of fluctuation display times of the specific identification information reaches the specific number during that time, and the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state is released. , There is a high probability that the player will move to the first gaming state with a high probability of being advantageous to the player. Further, as a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that a long time will be selected as the fluctuation time of the identification information (special symbol) in the second game state with a high probability. At the same time, when the fluctuation time of the identification information is long, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation display has a higher jackpot reliability than when the fluctuation time is short.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
It is characterized by having a first specific time and a second specific time longer than the first specific time as a fluctuation time of the specific identification information in the gaming state with a high probability and the second gaming state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the fluctuation time of the specific identification information in the second gaming state with high probability has a first specific time and a second specific time having different lengths. As a result, since the fluctuation time of the specific identification information selected in the gaming state of the second gaming state with high probability has different lengths of fluctuation time, the fluctuation time of the second gaming state with high probability is high. The timing of changing to the first gaming state is diversified. Further, this makes it difficult to predict the change timing at which the game state changes, and makes it possible to diversify the game playability.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-3.
A first specific condition state in which the fluctuation time of the specific identification information is determined based on the first specific condition and a second specific condition state in which the fluctuation time of the specific identification information is determined based on the second specific condition are set. Equipped with possible specific identification information fluctuation time determination means
The gaming states include the high probability and the second gaming state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second gaming state and the second specific condition state.
The high probability and the second gaming state and the second specific condition state are the average time of the fluctuation time of the specific identification information determined by the high probability and the second gaming state and the first specific condition state. Is characterized by being shortened.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a specific identification information fluctuation time determining means capable of setting a first specific condition state and a second specific condition state as a condition for determining the fluctuation time of the specific identification information. Further, the gaming state has a high probability, a second gaming state and a first specific condition state, and a high probability, a second gaming state and a second specific condition state. When the gaming state has a high probability, the second gaming state, and the second specific condition state, the average time of the fluctuation time of the specific identification information is higher than that of the gaming state, which has a high probability, the second gaming state, and the first specific condition state. Shall be shortened.

Further, as a result, even in the second gaming state with a high probability, the condition for determining the fluctuation time of the specific identification information at that time depends on whether the condition is the first specific condition state or the second specific condition state. The timing of changing from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state is different. Further, this makes it difficult to predict the change timing at which the game state changes, and makes it possible to diversify the game playability.

Further, the first special condition state (first condition state) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is determined based on the first special condition (first condition) and the second special condition (second special condition) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is determined. A second special condition state (second condition state) that is determined based on the condition) and an identification information fluctuation time determination means (second identification information fluctuation time determination means) that can be set are provided.
The gaming states include the high probability and the second gaming state and the first special condition state (the high probability and the second gaming state and the first condition state) and the high probability and the second gaming state and the second. It has a special condition state (the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state).
The high probability and the second gaming state and the second special condition state have a shorter average time of the fluctuation time of the identification information determined than the high probability and the second gaming state and the first special condition state. It may have a configuration.
* Further, as the gaming states, the high probability and the second gaming state and the first special condition state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second gaming state and the first special condition state and the second specific condition state. The states, the high probability and the second gaming state and the second special condition state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second gaming state and the second special condition state and the second specific condition state. It may have.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the gaming state.

(Reference Invention 8)
In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , There was a player who performed a big hit game that opened the big winning opening (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, there is a gaming machine that sets a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high base state. In addition, the game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the high base state that is set after the end of the big hit game, shifts to another game state when the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number or when a big hit occurs. It was supposed to be a possible specification.

In a gaming machine as described above, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the reduction speed of the possessed game ball can be reduced to play the game, so that the player can play the game until the next big hit game with a sense of security. It can be carried out. On the other hand, if the next big hit occurs immediately after being set to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state ends immediately, and the game cannot be sufficiently performed in the advantageous gaming state. There was a risk that the interest in the game would decline. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of prolonging the execution period of a gaming state advantageous to the player and enhancing the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
Based on the entry into the first starting port, the first hit / fail determination that can execute the jackpot determination to determine whether or not the hit is a big hit, and the first hit / fail determination.
Based on the entry into the second starting port, a large hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit and a small hit determination for determining whether or not a small hit can be performed, and a second hit / fail determination.
Based on the determination result of the first hit / miss determination, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information and the first identification information display means.
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second hit / fail determination, and
A jackpot game executing means that executes a jackpot game when the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second hit / fail determination is a small hit, and
With
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel.
It has a first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment.
When the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first hit / fail determination.
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the big hit determination cannot be executed and the second second hit / fail determination for executing the small hit determination is executed. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, a first hit / fail judgment that can execute a big hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a big hit, and a small hit judgment that determines whether or not it is a small hit are performed. The first identification information which has a feasible second hit / fail judgment and is variablely displayed based on the judgment result of the first hit / miss judgment, and the second identification information which is variablely displayed based on the judgment result of the second hit / miss judgment. Can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel. In addition, in the first specific fluctuation period, which is the fluctuation display period of the first identification information based on the determination of a jackpot in the first hit / fail judgment, the new first hit / fail judgment cannot be executed and the jackpot judgment cannot be executed. Moreover, it is possible to execute the second second hit / fail determination that can execute the small hit determination. As a result, the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, and even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit, a small hit is generated in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information, and the game profit can be obtained. .. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the first hit / fail judgment is "the first hit / fail judgment that can execute the big hit judgment for determining whether or not the ball is a big hit based on the entry into the first starting port", but this is at least the big hit judgment. It suffices to have, and it may have both a big hit determination and a small hit determination.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second second hit / miss determination a plurality of times in the first specific fluctuation period.

According to such a gaming machine, the second second hit / fail judgment can be executed a plurality of times in the first specific fluctuation period, which is the change display period of the first identification information based on the judgment of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment. It is a period of various lengths. As a result, the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, and the second hit / fail judgment is executed a plurality of times even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit, and the small hit is made in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information. It can be generated and game profit can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
The big hit game is characterized in that the game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the amount of game profit that can be obtained by the big hit game is larger than the amount of game profit that can be obtained by the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to obtain a smaller amount of game profit than the big hit game by the small hit game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-3.
The second starting port is a variable starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is determined to be a big hit is provided.
The gaming state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state.
The high probability and the first gaming state are set to a gaming state in which the small hit game is generated by the second hit / fail determination and a game profit can be obtained, so that the high probability and the second gaming state and the predetermined Probability and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The fluctuation time of the first identification information includes a first fluctuation time and a second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time.
The first specific fluctuation period is defined as the second fluctuation time.
When the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state, if the first hit / fail determination determines a big hit, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information, and the second variation. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second second hit / miss determination a plurality of times in time.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming states have a predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, and a high probability and the second gaming state, and have a high probability and the first gaming state. The state is a gaming state having a high probability and being more advantageous than the second gaming state, and a gaming state having a predetermined probability and being more gaming than the first gaming state. Further, when the gaming state has a high probability and is in the first gaming state, if a big hit is obtained in the first hit / fail determination, a second fluctuation time having a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information related to the jackpot. Then, in the second fluctuation time, the second second hit / miss determination can be executed a plurality of times.

As a result, when a high probability advantageous to the player and the first gaming state are set, the result of the first hit / fail determination becomes a big hit, and the second identification information is displayed even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit. The second hit / fail judgment of the above is executed a plurality of times, a small hit is generated in the hit / fail judgment of the second identification information, and the game profit can be obtained. Further, as a result, even if the first game state is set with a high probability advantageous to the player and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the fluctuation display time of the first identification information related to the big hit is secured for a long time. However, it is possible to secure the execution period of the second second hit / fail determination in the first game state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small hit game as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4.
When the high probability and the first gaming state are set as the gaming state, by the time the first hit / fail determination and / and the second hit / fail determination are executed a specific number of times in the high probability and the first gaming state. It is characterized in that the second fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information when it is determined to be a big hit in the first hit / fail determination.

According to such a gaming machine, the first hit / fail judgment is performed from the time when the game state has a high probability and the first game state is set until the first hit / miss judgment and / and the second hit / fail judgment is executed a specific number of times. If it is determined to be a big hit, the second fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information. According to this, when the game state has a high probability and the result of the first hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit in a short period of time after the first game state is set, the second fluctuation time of a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the big hit. It will be selected. Further, as a result, even if the condition that the gaming state has a high probability and the gaming state can be terminated in a short period of time after the first gaming state is set is satisfied, the variation display time of the first identification information related to the jackpot is lengthened. It is possible to secure time and secure the execution period of the second second hit / fail determination in the first game state with high probability, that is, the execution period of the small hit game as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by prolonging the execution period of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

(Reference Invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first acquired information storage means that can store the acquired information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port up to the first number.
A second acquired information storage means that can store the acquired information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port up to the second number.
Based on the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the first hit / fail determination that can execute the jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the first hit / fail determination.
Based on the acquired information stored in the second acquired information storage means, the second hit / fail determination that can execute the big hit determination for determining whether or not it is a big hit and the small hit determination for determining whether or not it is a small hit, and
Based on the determination result of the first hit / miss determination, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information and the first identification information display means.
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second hit / fail determination, and
A jackpot game executing means that executes a jackpot game when the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second hit / fail determination is a small hit, and
With
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel.
The game area has a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area).
The first starting port is provided in the first gaming area, and the second starting port is provided in the second gaming area.
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (low probability low base state) and a second gaming state (high probability low base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
When the game state is the first game state, the game is executed by firing the game ball into the first game area to execute the game mainly based on the first hit / fail determination.
When the game state is the second game state, the game is executed mainly based on the second hit / miss determination by firing the game ball into the second game area.
As the variation display time of the first identification information that can be selected when the result of the first hit / fail determination is incorrect, the first deviation variation time and the second deviation variation time longer than the first deviation variation time are set. Have and
In the period from the setting of the second gaming state to the first execution of the variation display of the first identification information, the first hit / fail determination is executed and the result of the first hit / miss determination is lost. In the case of, the first deviation fluctuation time may be selected as the fluctuation display time of the first identification information.

The first number and the second number may have the same value (for example, 4 pieces each) or different values (for example, 4 pieces for one and 6 pieces for the other). ..

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention.
In the period after the second gaming state is set and the variation display of the first identification information is executed the first time, the first hit / fail determination is executed and the result of the first hit / miss determination is lost. In the case of, the second deviation fluctuation time may be selected as the fluctuation display time of the first identification information.

Further, the gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention.
The first number and the first number may be characterized by having the same value.

Further, the gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the first to third inventions.
It has a first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment.
When the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first hit / fail determination.
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the big hit determination cannot be executed and the second second hit / fail determination for executing the small hit determination is executed. It may be assumed that.

Further, the gaming machine of the fifth invention is the gaming machine of the fourth invention.
The first specific fluctuation time is a jackpot fluctuation time longer than the second deviation fluctuation time.
In the period from the setting of the second gaming state to the first execution of the variation display of the first identification information, the first hit / fail determination is executed and the result of the first hit / miss determination is a big hit. In the case of, the jackpot fluctuation time may be selected as the fluctuation display time of the first identification information.

It should be noted that any one or more of the above-mentioned Reference Inventions 1 to 9 can be combined to form another invention. In this case as well, the same effect as described above is obtained.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (Production symbol display area), 8 Production symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 Specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (5)

The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
Based on the entry into the first starting port, the first hit / fail determination that can execute the jackpot determination to determine whether or not the hit is a big hit, and the first hit / fail determination.
Based on the entry into the second starting port, a large hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit and a small hit determination for determining whether or not a small hit can be performed, and a second hit / fail determination.
Based on the determination result of the first hit / miss determination, the first identification information display means for variablely displaying the first identification information and the first identification information display means.
A second identification information display means for variablely displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second hit / fail determination, and
A jackpot game executing means that executes a jackpot game when the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second hit / fail determination is a small hit, and
With
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel.
It has a first specific fluctuation period, which is an execution period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information based on the determination of a big hit in the first hit / fail judgment.
When the ball enters the first starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first hit / fail determination.
When the ball enters the second starting port during the first specific fluctuation period, the big hit determination cannot be executed and the second second hit / fail determination for executing the small hit determination is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second second hit / miss determination can be executed a plurality of times in the first specific fluctuation period. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the big hit game has a larger game profit that can be obtained than the small hit game. The second starting port is a variable starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. Settable game state setting means and
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is determined to be a big hit is provided.
The gaming state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state.
The high probability and the first gaming state are set to a gaming state in which the small hit game is generated by the second hit / fail determination and a game profit can be obtained, so that the high probability and the second gaming state and the predetermined Probability and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The variation display time of the first identification information includes a first variation time and a second variation time longer than the first variation time.
The first specific fluctuation period is defined as the second fluctuation time.
When the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state, if the first hit / fail determination determines a big hit, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information, and the second variation. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second second hit / miss determination can be executed a plurality of times in time. When the high probability and the first gaming state are set as the gaming states, by the time the first hit / fail determination and / and the second hit / fail determination are executed a specific number of times in the high probability and the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the second fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first identification information when it is determined to be a big hit in the first hit / fail determination.

Images